2009-02-04 Tristan Gingold <gingold@adacore.com>
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
793c5807 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
338 gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
343
344Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
345linker:
346
ff5dcc92 347@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 348@include at-file.texi
dff70155 349
252b5132
RH
350@kindex -a@var{keyword}
351@item -a@var{keyword}
352This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
353argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
354@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
355@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
356to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
357
358@ifset I960
359@cindex architectures
360@kindex -A@var{arch}
361@item -A@var{architecture}
362@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
363@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
364In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
365Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
366@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
367the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 368archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
369family}, for details.
370
ff5dcc92 371Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
372other architecture families.
373@end ifset
374
375@ifclear SingleFormat
376@cindex binary input format
377@kindex -b @var{format}
378@kindex --format=@var{format}
379@cindex input format
380@cindex input format
381@item -b @var{input-format}
382@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
383@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
384file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 385@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 386that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 387configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 388to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
389default input format the most usual format on each machine.
390@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
391supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
392formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
393@xref{BFD}.
394
395You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
396binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
397linking object files of different formats), by including
398@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 399particular format.
252b5132
RH
400
401The default format is taken from the environment variable
402@code{GNUTARGET}.
403@ifset UsesEnvVars
404@xref{Environment}.
405@end ifset
406You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
407@code{TARGET};
408@ifclear man
409see @ref{Format Commands}.
410@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
411@end ifclear
412
413@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
414@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
415@cindex compatibility, MRI
416@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
417@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 418For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 419files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
420@ifclear man
421@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
422@end ifclear
423@ifset man
424the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
425@end ifset
426Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 427the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
428scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
429If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
430specified by any @samp{-L} options.
431
432@cindex common allocation
433@kindex -d
434@kindex -dc
435@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 436@item -d
252b5132
RH
437@itemx -dc
438@itemx -dp
439These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
440compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
441even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
442script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
443@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
444
445@cindex entry point, from command line
446@kindex -e @var{entry}
447@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 448@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
449@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
450Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
451program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
452named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
453and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
454base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
455@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
456and other ways of specifying the entry point.
457
b58f81ae
DJ
458@kindex --exclude-libs
459@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
460Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 461exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
462@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
463automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
464port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
465explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
466option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
467be treated as hidden.
468
e1c37eb5
DK
469@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
470@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
471Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
472should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
473into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
474may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
475used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
476the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
477match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
478command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
479of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
480regardless of this option.
481
252b5132
RH
482@cindex dynamic symbol table
483@kindex -E
484@kindex --export-dynamic
485@item -E
486@itemx --export-dynamic
487When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
488dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
489which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
490
491If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
492contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
493mentioned in the link.
494
495If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
496back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
497dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
498linking the program itself.
499
55255dae 500You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 501be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 502See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 503
36f63dca 504@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
505@cindex big-endian objects
506@cindex endianness
507@kindex -EB
508@item -EB
509Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
510
511@cindex little-endian objects
512@kindex -EL
513@item -EL
514Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 515@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
516
517@kindex -f
518@kindex --auxiliary
519@item -f
520@itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
521When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
522to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
523table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
524symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
525
526If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
527run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
528the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
529first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
530@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
531in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
532Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
533implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
534machine specific performance.
535
536This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
537will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
538
539@kindex -F
540@kindex --filter
541@item -F @var{name}
542@itemx --filter @var{name}
543When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
544the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
545of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
546on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
547
548If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
549run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
550dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
551filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
552found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
553used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
554@var{name}.
555
ff5dcc92 556Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 557toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
558object files.
559@ifclear SingleFormat
560The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 561@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 562@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
563environment variable.
564@end ifclear
565The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
566creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 567
3dbf70a2
MM
568@cindex finalization function
569@kindex -fini
570@item -fini @var{name}
571When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
572executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
573address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
574the function to call.
575
252b5132
RH
576@kindex -g
577@item -g
578Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
579
580@kindex -G
581@kindex --gpsize
582@cindex object size
583@item -G@var{value}
584@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
585Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
586@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
587MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
588sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
589
590@cindex runtime library name
591@kindex -h@var{name}
592@kindex -soname=@var{name}
593@item -h@var{name}
594@itemx -soname=@var{name}
595When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
596the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
597which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
598linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
599field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
600
601@kindex -i
602@cindex incremental link
603@item -i
604Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
605
3dbf70a2
MM
606@cindex initialization function
607@kindex -init
608@item -init @var{name}
609When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
610executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
611of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
612function to call.
613
252b5132 614@cindex archive files, from cmd line
bcb674cf
RS
615@kindex -l@var{namespec}
616@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
617@item -l@var{namespec}
618@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
619Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
620list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
621If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
622will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
623will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 624
ff5dcc92 625On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
626files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
627and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
628called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
629@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
630indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
631to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
632@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
633
634The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
635specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
636was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
637command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
638archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
639the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
640
ff5dcc92 641See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
642archives multiple times.
643
644You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
645
646@ifset GENERIC
647This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 648if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
649behaviour of the AIX linker.
650@end ifset
651
652@cindex search directory, from cmd line
653@kindex -L@var{dir}
654@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
a1ab1d2a 655@item -L@var{searchdir}
252b5132 656@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
657Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
658for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
659option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
660in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
661on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 662@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
663order in which the options appear.
664
9c8ebd6a
DJ
665If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
666by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
667
252b5132
RH
668@ifset UsesEnvVars
669The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 670@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
671some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
672@end ifset
673
674The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
675@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
676at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
677
678@cindex emulation
679@kindex -m @var{emulation}
680@item -m@var{emulation}
681Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
682emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
683
684If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
685@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
686
687Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
688configured.
689
690@cindex link map
691@kindex -M
692@kindex --print-map
693@item -M
694@itemx --print-map
695Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
696information about the link, including the following:
697
698@itemize @bullet
699@item
3b83e13a 700Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
701@item
702How common symbols are allocated.
703@item
704All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
705which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
706@item
707The values assigned to symbols.
708
709Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
710involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
711have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
712linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
713of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
714the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
715linker script containing:
716
717@smallexample
718 foo = 1
719 foo = foo * 4
720 foo = foo + 8
721@end smallexample
722
723will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
724option is used:
725
726@smallexample
727 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
728 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
729 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
730@end smallexample
731
732See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
733scripts.
252b5132
RH
734@end itemize
735
736@kindex -n
737@cindex read-only text
738@cindex NMAGIC
739@kindex --nmagic
740@item -n
741@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 742Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 743@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
744
745@kindex -N
746@kindex --omagic
747@cindex read/write from cmd line
748@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 749@item -N
252b5132
RH
750@itemx --omagic
751Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
752not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
753libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
754mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
755is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
756specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
757
758@kindex --no-omagic
759@cindex OMAGIC
760@item --no-omagic
761This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
762sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
763be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
764shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
765
766@kindex -o @var{output}
767@kindex --output=@var{output}
768@cindex naming the output file
769@item -o @var{output}
770@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 771Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
772option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
773script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
774
775@kindex -O @var{level}
776@cindex generating optimized output
777@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 778If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 779the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
780should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
781option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
782the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
783no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
784of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 785
a712da20
NC
786@kindex -q
787@kindex --emit-relocs
788@cindex retain relocations in final executable
789@item -q
790@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 791Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
792Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
793order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
794in larger executables.
795
dbab7a7b
NC
796This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
797
4f471f39
RS
798@kindex --force-dynamic
799@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
800@item --force-dynamic
801Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
802to VxWorks targets.
803
252b5132
RH
804@cindex partial link
805@cindex relocatable output
806@kindex -r
1049f94e 807@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 808@item -r
1049f94e 809@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 810Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 811turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
812linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
813magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
814@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 815@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
816If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
817linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
818constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
819
62bf86b4
HPN
820When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
821partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
822relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
823example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
824with input files in other formats at all.
825
252b5132
RH
826This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
827
828@kindex -R @var{file}
829@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
830@cindex symbol-only input
831@item -R @var{filename}
832@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
833Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
834relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
835to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
836programs. You may use this option more than once.
837
ff5dcc92 838For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 839followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 840the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
841
842@kindex -s
843@kindex --strip-all
844@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 845@item -s
252b5132
RH
846@itemx --strip-all
847Omit all symbol information from the output file.
848
849@kindex -S
850@kindex --strip-debug
851@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 852@item -S
252b5132
RH
853@itemx --strip-debug
854Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
855
856@kindex -t
857@kindex --trace
858@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 859@item -t
252b5132 860@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 861Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
862
863@kindex -T @var{script}
864@kindex --script=@var{script}
865@cindex script files
866@item -T @var{scriptfile}
867@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
868Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 869@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 870@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
871output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
872the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
873specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
874options accumulate.
252b5132 875
14be8564
L
876@kindex -dT @var{script}
877@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
878@cindex script files
879@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
880@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
881Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
882
883This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
884processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
885command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
886@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
887behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
888command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
889the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
890@samp{gcc}).
891
252b5132
RH
892@kindex -u @var{symbol}
893@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
894@cindex undefined symbol
895@item -u @var{symbol}
896@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
897Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
898symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
899modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
900different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
901option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
902
903@kindex -Ur
904@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 905@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
906For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
907@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 908turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
909@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
910It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
911with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
912be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
913@samp{-r} for the others.
914
577a0623
AM
915@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
916@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
917Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
918@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
919missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
920specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
921multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
922input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
923in a linker script.
a854a4a7 924
252b5132
RH
925@kindex -v
926@kindex -V
927@kindex --version
928@cindex version
929@item -v
930@itemx --version
931@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 932Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
933lists the supported emulations.
934
935@kindex -x
936@kindex --discard-all
937@cindex deleting local symbols
938@item -x
939@itemx --discard-all
940Delete all local symbols.
941
942@kindex -X
943@kindex --discard-locals
944@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 945@item -X
252b5132 946@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
947Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
948system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
949or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
950
951@kindex -y @var{symbol}
952@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
953@cindex symbol tracing
954@item -y @var{symbol}
955@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
956Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
957option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
958to prepend an underscore.
959
960This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
961don't know where the reference is coming from.
962
963@kindex -Y @var{path}
964@item -Y @var{path}
965Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
966for Solaris compatibility.
967
968@kindex -z @var{keyword}
969@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
970The recognized keywords are:
971@table @samp
972
973@item combreloc
974Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
975lookup caching possible.
976
977@item defs
560e09e9 978Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 979shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 980
6aa29e7b
JJ
981@item execstack
982Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
983
cd6d6c15
NC
984@item initfirst
985This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
986It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
987before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
988the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
989the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
990objects.
991
992@item interpose
993Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
994but the primary executable.
995
5fa222e4
AM
996@item lazy
997When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
998dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
999the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1000Lazy binding is the default.
1001
cd6d6c15
NC
1002@item loadfltr
1003Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1004runtime.
1005
1006@item muldefs
1007Allows multiple definitions.
1008
1009@item nocombreloc
1010Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1011
1012@item nocopyreloc
1013Disables production of copy relocs.
1014
1015@item nodefaultlib
1016Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1017ignore any default library search paths.
1018
1019@item nodelete
1020Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1021
1022@item nodlopen
1023Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1024
1025@item nodump
1026Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1027
6aa29e7b
JJ
1028@item noexecstack
1029Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1030
1031@item norelro
1032Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1033
cd6d6c15
NC
1034@item now
1035When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1036dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1037when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1038deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1039first called.
1040
1041@item origin
1042Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1043
6aa29e7b
JJ
1044@item relro
1045Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1046
24718e3b
L
1047@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1048Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1049
1050@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1051Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1052
cd6d6c15
NC
1053@end table
1054
ece2d90e 1055Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1056
1057@kindex -(
1058@cindex groups of archives
1059@item -( @var{archives} -)
1060@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1061The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1062either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1063
1064The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1065references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1066the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1067archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1068object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1069would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1070they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1071resolved.
1072
1073Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1074it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1075more archives.
1076
69da35b5
NC
1077@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1078@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1079@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1080@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1081Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1082recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1083and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1084the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1085behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1086so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1087restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1088
4a43e768
AM
1089@kindex --as-needed
1090@kindex --no-as-needed
1091@item --as-needed
1092@itemx --no-as-needed
1093This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1094on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1095the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1096on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1097needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1098for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1099which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1100the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1101linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1102@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1103
e56f61be
L
1104@kindex --add-needed
1105@kindex --no-add-needed
1106@item --add-needed
1107@itemx --no-add-needed
1108This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1109DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1110the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1111a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1112@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1113for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1114the default behaviour.
1115
252b5132
RH
1116@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1117@item -assert @var{keyword}
1118This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1119
1120@kindex -Bdynamic
1121@kindex -dy
1122@kindex -call_shared
1123@item -Bdynamic
1124@itemx -dy
1125@itemx -call_shared
1126Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1127for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1128default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1129for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1130multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1131@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1132
a1ab1d2a
UD
1133@kindex -Bgroup
1134@item -Bgroup
1135Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1136section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1137object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1138@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1139only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1140
252b5132
RH
1141@kindex -Bstatic
1142@kindex -dn
1143@kindex -non_shared
1144@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1145@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1146@itemx -dn
1147@itemx -non_shared
1148@itemx -static
1149Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1150platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1151variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1152may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1153library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1154option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1155option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1156shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1157references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1158libraries.
252b5132
RH
1159
1160@kindex -Bsymbolic
1161@item -Bsymbolic
1162When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1163definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1164for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1165within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1166platforms which support shared libraries.
1167
40b36307
L
1168@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1169@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1170When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1171symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1172This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1173libraries.
1174
55255dae
L
1175@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1176@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1177Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1178typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1179global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1180within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1181to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1182in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1183which support shared libraries.
1184
1185The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1186scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1187
40b36307
L
1188@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1189@item --dynamic-list-data
1190Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1191
1192@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1193@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1194Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1195is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1196
0b8a70d9
L
1197@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1198@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1199Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1200
252b5132
RH
1201@kindex --check-sections
1202@kindex --no-check-sections
1203@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1204@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1205Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1206been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1207perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1208suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1209allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1210restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1211Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1212force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1213option.
252b5132
RH
1214
1215@cindex cross reference table
1216@kindex --cref
1217@item --cref
1218Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1219generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1220Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1221
1222The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1223easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1224sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1225symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1226definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1227
4818e05f
AM
1228@cindex common allocation
1229@kindex --no-define-common
1230@item --no-define-common
1231This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1232The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1233@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1234
1235The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1236the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1237of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1238forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1239Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1240from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1241This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1242and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1243duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1244paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1245
252b5132
RH
1246@cindex symbols, from command line
1247@kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1248@item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1249Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1250address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1251times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1252limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1253context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1254symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1255constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1256using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1257Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1258space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1259@var{expression}.
1260
1261@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1262@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1263@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1264@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1265@itemx --no-demangle
1266These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1267and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1268present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1269underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1270mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1271different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1272to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1273demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1274is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1275
1276@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1277@kindex -I@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1278@kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1279@item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1280Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1281generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1282linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1283doing.
1284
7ce691ae 1285@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1286@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1287@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1288@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1289Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1290with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1291
252b5132
RH
1292@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1293@item --force-exe-suffix
1294Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1295
1296If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1297@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1298the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1299option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1300Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1301it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1302
1303@kindex --gc-sections
1304@kindex --no-gc-sections
1305@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1306@item --gc-sections
1307@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1308Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1309targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1310performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1311@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1312
d5465ba2
AM
1313@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1314examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1315symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1316command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1317referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1318libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1319referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1320the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1321relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1322
ac69cbc6
TG
1323This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1324@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1325specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1326a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1327
c17d87de
NC
1328@kindex --print-gc-sections
1329@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1330@cindex garbage collection
1331@item --print-gc-sections
1332@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1333List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1334printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1335collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1336default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1337be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1338line.
1339
252b5132
RH
1340@cindex help
1341@cindex usage
1342@kindex --help
1343@item --help
1344Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1345
ea20a7da
CC
1346@kindex --target-help
1347@item --target-help
1348Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1349
252b5132
RH
1350@kindex -Map
1351@item -Map @var{mapfile}
1352Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1353@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1354
1355@cindex memory usage
1356@kindex --no-keep-memory
1357@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1358@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1359symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1360instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1361necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1362while linking a large executable.
1363
1364@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1365@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1366@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1367@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1368Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1369is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1370The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1371behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1372libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1373
aa713662
L
1374@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1375@kindex -z muldefs
1376@item --allow-multiple-definition
1377@itemx -z muldefs
1378Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1379report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1380first definition will be used.
1381
b79e8c78 1382@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1383@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1384@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1385@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
560e09e9
NC
1386Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1387This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1388determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1389shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1390how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1391
1392The reason that @option{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
1393the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same as
1394the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
ae9a127f 1395resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
560e09e9 1396undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal. (The kernel patches
ece2d90e 1397them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
560e09e9
NC
1398for the current architecture. This is used for example to dynamically
1399select an appropriate memset function). Apparently it is also normal
1400for HPPA shared libraries to have undefined symbols.
b79e8c78 1401
31941635
L
1402@kindex --no-undefined-version
1403@item --no-undefined-version
1404Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1405it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1406will be issued instead.
1407
3e3b46e5
PB
1408@kindex --default-symver
1409@item --default-symver
1410Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1411exported symbols.
1412
1413@kindex --default-imported-symver
1414@item --default-imported-symver
1415Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1416imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1417
252b5132
RH
1418@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1419@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1420Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1421files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1422been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1423This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1424errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1425have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1426inappropriate.
1427
fe7929ce
AM
1428@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1429@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1430Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1431library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1432
252b5132
RH
1433@kindex --no-whole-archive
1434@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1435Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1436archive files.
1437
1438@cindex output file after errors
1439@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1440@item --noinhibit-exec
1441Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1442Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1443errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1444when it issues any error whatsoever.
1445
0a9c1c8e
CD
1446@kindex -nostdlib
1447@item -nostdlib
1448Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1449command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1450(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1451
252b5132
RH
1452@ifclear SingleFormat
1453@kindex --oformat
1454@item --oformat @var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1455@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1456file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1457@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1458object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1459object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1460should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1461usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1462name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1463list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1464command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1465this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1466@end ifclear
1467
36af4a4e
JJ
1468@kindex -pie
1469@kindex --pic-executable
1470@item -pie
1471@itemx --pic-executable
1472@cindex position independent executables
1473Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1474ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1475libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1476address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1477normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1478defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1479
252b5132
RH
1480@kindex -qmagic
1481@item -qmagic
1482This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1483
1484@kindex -Qy
1485@item -Qy
1486This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1487
1488@kindex --relax
1489@cindex synthesizing linker
1490@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1491@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1492An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1493@ifset GENERIC
1494This option is only supported on a few targets.
1495@end ifset
1496@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1497@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1498@end ifset
1499@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1500@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1501@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1502@ifset XTENSA
1503@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1504@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1505@ifset M68HC11
1506@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1507@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1508@ifset POWERPC
1509@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1510@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1511
1512On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1513optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1514in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1515instructions in the output object file.
1516
1517On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1518debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1519@ifset GENERIC
1520This is known to be
1521the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1522@end ifset
1523
1524@ifset GENERIC
1525On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1526but ignored.
1527@end ifset
1528
1529@cindex retaining specified symbols
1530@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1531@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1532@item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
1533Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1534discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1535symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1536@ifset GENERIC
1537(such as VxWorks)
1538@end ifset
1539where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1540run-time memory.
1541
1542@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1543or symbols needed for relocations.
1544
1545You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1546line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1547
1548@ifset GENERIC
1549@item -rpath @var{dir}
1550@cindex runtime library search path
1551@kindex -rpath
1552Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1553linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1554arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1555them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1556also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1557objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1558@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1559ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1560@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1561
ff5dcc92 1562The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1563SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1564@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1565runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1566options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1567gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1568file systems.
252b5132 1569
ff5dcc92 1570For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1571followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1572the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1573@end ifset
1574
1575@ifset GENERIC
1576@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1577@kindex -rpath-link
1578@item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
1579When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1580happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1581of the input files.
1582
1583When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1584non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1585shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1586explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1587specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1588@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1589either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1590appearing multiple times.
1591
28c309a2
NC
1592This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1593that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1594is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1595runtime linker would do.
1596
252b5132 1597The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1598libraries:
252b5132
RH
1599@enumerate
1600@item
ff5dcc92 1601Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1602@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1603Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1604between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1605specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1606used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1607at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1608by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1609the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1610@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1611On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1612@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1613environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1614@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1615On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1616directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1617@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1618For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1619variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1620@item
ec4eb78a
L
1621For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1622@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1623libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1624@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1625@item
252b5132
RH
1626The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1627@item
1628For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1629exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1630@end enumerate
1631
1632If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1633warning and continue with the link.
1634@end ifset
1635
1636@kindex -shared
1637@kindex -Bshareable
1638@item -shared
1639@itemx -Bshareable
1640@cindex shared libraries
1641Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1642and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1643shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1644undefined symbols in the link.
1645
de7dd2bd 1646@item --sort-common [= ascending | descending]
252b5132 1647@kindex --sort-common
de7dd2bd
NC
1648This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1649ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1650sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1651eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1652between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1653specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1654
bcaa7b3e
L
1655@kindex --sort-section name
1656@item --sort-section name
1657This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1658patterns in the linker script.
1659
1660@kindex --sort-section alignment
1661@item --sort-section alignment
1662This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1663patterns in the linker script.
1664
252b5132 1665@kindex --split-by-file
a854a4a7 1666@item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1667Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1668each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1669size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1670
1671@kindex --split-by-reloc
a854a4a7
AM
1672@item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
1673Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1674output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1675This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1676certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1677cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1678that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1679support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1680input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1681more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1682many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1683
1684@kindex --stats
1685@item --stats
1686Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1687as execution time and memory usage.
1688
e2243057
RS
1689@kindex --sysroot
1690@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1691Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1692configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1693that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1694
252b5132
RH
1695@kindex --traditional-format
1696@cindex traditional format
1697@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1698For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1699the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1700use the traditional format instead.
1701
1702@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1703For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1704symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1705full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1706@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1707trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1708combine duplicate entries.
1709
176355da
NC
1710@kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1711@item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1712Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1713address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1714times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1715line.
1716@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1717for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1718@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1719should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1720sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1721
252b5132
RH
1722@kindex -Tbss @var{org}
1723@kindex -Tdata @var{org}
1724@kindex -Ttext @var{org}
1725@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1726@item -Tbss @var{org}
1727@itemx -Tdata @var{org}
1728@itemx -Ttext @var{org}
a6e02871
AO
1729Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1730@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1731
258795f5
L
1732@kindex -Ttext-segment @var{org}
1733@itemx -Ttext-segment @var{org}
1734@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1735When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1736of the first byte of the text segment.
1737
560e09e9
NC
1738@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1739@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1740Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1741values for @samp{method}:
1742
1743@table @samp
1744@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1745Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1746
1747@item report-all
da8bce14 1748Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1749
1750@item ignore-in-object-files
1751Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1752ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1753
1754@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1755Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1756ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1757when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1758libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1759command line.
1760@end table
1761
1762The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1763by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1764
1765Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1766unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1767can change this to a warning.
1768
252b5132
RH
1769@kindex --verbose
1770@cindex verbose
1771@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1772@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1773Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1774supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1775the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1776
1777@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1778@cindex version script, symbol versions
1779@itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1780Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1781used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1782about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1783is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1784@xref{VERSION}.
1785
7ce691ae 1786@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1787@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1788@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1789@item --warn-common
1790Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1791a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1792but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1793you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1794Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1795warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1796
1797There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1798
1799@table @samp
1800@item int i = 1;
1801A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1802file.
1803
1804@item extern int i;
1805An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1806There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1807variable somewhere.
1808
1809@item int i;
1810A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1811variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1812The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1813single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1814size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1815a definition of the same variable.
1816@end table
1817
1818The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1819Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1820just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1821encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1822a common symbol.
1823
1824@enumerate
1825@item
1826Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1827definition for the symbol.
1828@smallexample
1829@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1830 overridden by definition
1831@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1832@end smallexample
1833
1834@item
1835Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1836the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1837except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1838@smallexample
1839@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1840 overriding common
1841@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1842@end smallexample
1843
1844@item
1845Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1846@smallexample
1847@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1848 of `@var{symbol}'
1849@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1850@end smallexample
1851
1852@item
1853Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1854@smallexample
1855@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1856 overridden by larger common
1857@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1858@end smallexample
1859
1860@item
1861Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1862the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1863encountered in a different order.
1864@smallexample
1865@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1866 overriding smaller common
1867@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1868@end smallexample
1869@end enumerate
1870
1871@kindex --warn-constructors
1872@item --warn-constructors
1873Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1874object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1875detect the use of global constructors.
1876
1877@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1878@item --warn-multiple-gp
1879Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1880This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1881Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1882section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1883of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1884base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1885base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1886bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1887large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1888values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1889option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1890
1891@kindex --warn-once
1892@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1893@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1894@item --warn-once
1895Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1896which refers to it.
1897
1898@kindex --warn-section-align
1899@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1900@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1901@item --warn-section-align
1902Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1903alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1904The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1905is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1906the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1907
8fdd7217
NC
1908@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1909@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1910Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1911
560e09e9
NC
1912@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1913@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1914If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1915@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1916This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1917
1918@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1919@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1920This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1921it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1922
252b5132
RH
1923@kindex --whole-archive
1924@cindex including an entire archive
1925@item --whole-archive
1926For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1927@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1928in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1929files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1930library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1931library. This option may be used more than once.
1932
7ec229ce 1933Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1934about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1935Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1936list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1937your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1938
252b5132
RH
1939@kindex --wrap
1940@item --wrap @var{symbol}
1941Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1942@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1943undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1944@var{symbol}.
1945
1946This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1947wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1948wishes to call the system function, it should call
1949@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1950
1951Here is a trivial example:
1952
1953@smallexample
1954void *
cc2f008e 1955__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1956@{
cc2f008e 1957 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1958 return __real_malloc (c);
1959@}
1960@end smallexample
1961
ff5dcc92 1962If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1963all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1964instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1965call the real @code{malloc} function.
1966
1967You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1968links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1969you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1970file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1971call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1972
6aa29e7b
JJ
1973@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
1974@item --eh-frame-hdr
1975Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
1976@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
1977
6c1439be
L
1978@kindex --enable-new-dtags
1979@kindex --disable-new-dtags
1980@item --enable-new-dtags
1981@itemx --disable-new-dtags
1982This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
1983systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
1984@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1985If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
1986created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
1987those options are only available for ELF systems.
1988
2d643429 1989@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 1990@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
1991Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1992close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1993time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1994increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
1995value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
1996
fdc90cb4
JJ
1997@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
1998@item --hash-style=@var{style}
1999Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2000@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2001new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2002the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2003hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2004
35835446
JR
2005@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2006@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2007This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2008linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2009for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2010about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2011
4f9c04f7 2012Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20131021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2014run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2015has been used.
2016
2017The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2018enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2019
c0065db7
RM
2020@kindex --build-id
2021@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2022@item --build-id
2023@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2024Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2025The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2026file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2027@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2028parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2029@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2030@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2031an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2032characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2033omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2034
2035The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2036that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2037unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2038to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2039file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2040string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2041
2042Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2043@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2044@end table
2045
0285c67d
NC
2046@c man end
2047
36f63dca 2048@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2049
0285c67d
NC
2050@c man begin OPTIONS
2051
ff5dcc92 2052The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2053the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2054normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2055use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2056@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2057like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2058symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2059object file).
2060
2061In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2062support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2063PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2064values by either a space or an equals sign.
2065
ff5dcc92 2066@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2067
2068@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2069@item --add-stdcall-alias
2070If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2071as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2072[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2073
2074@kindex --base-file
2075@item --base-file @var{file}
2076Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2077addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2078@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2079[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2080
2081@kindex --dll
2082@item --dll
2083Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2084@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2085file.
bb10df36 2086[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2087
2088@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2089@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2090@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2091@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2092If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2093do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2094only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2095resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2096undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2097@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2098to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2099warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2100import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2101to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2102feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2103@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2104mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2105[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@cindex DLLs, creating
2108@kindex --export-all-symbols
2109@item --export-all-symbols
2110If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2111be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2112otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2113explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2114attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2115option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2116@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2117@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2118exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2119re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2120such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2121@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2122@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2123Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2124not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2125extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2126(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2127These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2128@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2129@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2130@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2131@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2132[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2133
2134@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2135@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2136Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2137exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2138[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2139
2140@kindex --file-alignment
2141@item --file-alignment
2142Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2143file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2144512.
bb10df36 2145[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2146
2147@cindex heap size
2148@kindex --heap
2149@item --heap @var{reserve}
2150@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2151Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2152to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2153committed.
bb10df36 2154[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2155
2156@cindex image base
2157@kindex --image-base
2158@item --image-base @var{value}
2159Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2160the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2161is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2162your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2163other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2164for dlls.
bb10df36 2165[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2166
2167@kindex --kill-at
2168@item --kill-at
2169If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2170symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2171[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2172
26d2d8a2
BF
2173@kindex --large-address-aware
2174@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2175If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2176header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2177greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2178or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2179section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2180[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2181
252b5132
RH
2182@kindex --major-image-version
2183@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2184Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2185[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2186
2187@kindex --major-os-version
2188@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2189Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2190[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2191
2192@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2193@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2194Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2195[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2196
2197@kindex --minor-image-version
2198@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2199Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2200[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2201
2202@kindex --minor-os-version
2203@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2204Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2205[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2206
2207@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2208@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2209Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2210[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2211
2212@cindex DEF files, creating
2213@cindex DLLs, creating
2214@kindex --output-def
2215@item --output-def @var{file}
2216The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2217file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2218(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2219library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2220automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2221[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2222
b044cda1
CW
2223@cindex DLLs, creating
2224@kindex --out-implib
2225@item --out-implib @var{file}
2226The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2227import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2228import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2229may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2230makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2231creation step.
bb10df36 2232[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2233
2234@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2235@item --enable-auto-image-base
2236Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2237using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2238from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2239collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2240avoided.
bb10df36 2241[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2242
2243@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2244@item --disable-auto-image-base
2245Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2246user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2247default.
bb10df36 2248[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2249
2250@cindex DLLs, linking to
2251@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2252@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2253When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2254search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2255@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2256between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2257uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2258@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2259[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2260
2261@kindex --enable-auto-import
2262@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2263Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2264DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2265building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2266'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2267to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2268specification published by Microsoft.
2269
e2a83dd0
NC
2270Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2271data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2272placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2273around a problem with consts that is described here:
2274http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2275
4d8907ac
DS
2276Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2277see this message:
0d888aac 2278
ece2d90e 2279"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2280documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2281
ece2d90e
NC
2282This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2283ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2284allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2285fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2286constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2287multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2288this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2289of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2290the warning, and exit.
2291
2292There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2293data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2294
2fa9fc65
NC
2295One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2296of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2297this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2298
c0065db7
RM
2299A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2300that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2301there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2302a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2303
2304@example
2305extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2306extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2307 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2308@end example
2309
2310or
2311
2312@example
2313extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2314extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2315 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2316@end example
2317
c0065db7 2318For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2319is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2320
2321@example
2322extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2323extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2324 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2325@end example
2326
c406afaf
NC
2327or
2328
2329@example
2330extern long long extern_ll;
2331extern_ll -->
2332 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2333@end example
2334
2fa9fc65 2335A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2336'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2337@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2338requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2339building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2340merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2341between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2342constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2343
2344Original:
2345@example
2346--foo.h
2347extern int arr[];
2348--foo.c
2349#include "foo.h"
2350void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2351 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2352@}
2353@end example
2354
2355Solution 1:
2356@example
2357--foo.h
2358extern int arr[];
2359--foo.c
2360#include "foo.h"
2361void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2362 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2363 volatile int *parr = arr;
2364 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2365@}
2366@end example
2367
2368Solution 2:
2369@example
2370--foo.h
2371/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2372#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2373 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2374#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2375#else
2376#define FOO_IMPORT
2377#endif
2378extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2379--foo.c
2380#include "foo.h"
2381void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2382 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2383@}
2384@end example
2385
c0065db7 2386A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2387library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2388for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2389functions).
bb10df36 2390[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2391
2392@kindex --disable-auto-import
2393@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2394Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2395@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2396[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2397
2fa9fc65
NC
2398@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2399@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2400If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2401that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2402a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2403environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2404[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2405
2406@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2407@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2408Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2409DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2410[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2411
b044cda1
CW
2412@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2413@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2414Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2415[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2416
252b5132
RH
2417@kindex --section-alignment
2418@item --section-alignment
2419Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2420addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2421[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2422
2423@cindex stack size
2424@kindex --stack
2425@item --stack @var{reserve}
2426@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2427Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2428to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2429committed.
bb10df36 2430[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2431
2432@kindex --subsystem
2433@item --subsystem @var{which}
2434@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2435@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2436Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2437legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2438@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2439the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2440@var{which}.
bb10df36 2441[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2442
2443@end table
2444
0285c67d
NC
2445@c man end
2446
93fd0973
SC
2447@ifset M68HC11
2448@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2449
2450@c man begin OPTIONS
2451
2452The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2453memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2454
2455@table @gcctabopt
2456
2457@kindex --no-trampoline
2458@item --no-trampoline
2459This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2460is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2461instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2462
2463@kindex --bank-window
2464@item --bank-window @var{name}
2465This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2466the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2467The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2468paging and addresses within the memory window.
2469
2470@end table
2471
2472@c man end
2473@end ifset
2474
7fb9f789
NC
2475@ifset M68K
2476@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2477
2478@c man begin OPTIONS
2479
2480The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2481when linking for 68K targets.
2482
2483@table @gcctabopt
2484
2485@kindex --got
2486@item --got=@var{type}
2487This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2488@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2489@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2490Info entry for @file{ld}.
2491
2492@end table
2493
2494@c man end
2495@end ifset
2496
252b5132
RH
2497@ifset UsesEnvVars
2498@node Environment
2499@section Environment Variables
2500
0285c67d
NC
2501@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2502
560e09e9 2503You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2504@ifclear SingleFormat
2505@code{GNUTARGET},
2506@end ifclear
2507@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2508
36f63dca 2509@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2510@kindex GNUTARGET
2511@cindex default input format
2512@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2513use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2514of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2515@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2516of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2517attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2518this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2519there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2520object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2521BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2522in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2523@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2524
2525@kindex LDEMULATION
2526@cindex default emulation
2527@cindex emulation, default
2528@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2529@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2530behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2531available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2532the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2533variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2534linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2535
2536@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2537@cindex demangling, default
2538Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2539@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2540default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2541a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2542may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2543options.
2544
0285c67d
NC
2545@c man end
2546@end ifset
2547
252b5132
RH
2548@node Scripts
2549@chapter Linker Scripts
2550
2551@cindex scripts
2552@cindex linker scripts
2553@cindex command files
2554Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2555written in the linker command language.
2556
2557The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2558the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2559the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2560more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2561direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2562described below.
2563
2564The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2565yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2566linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2567to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2568such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2569
2570You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2571line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2572default linker script.
2573
2574You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2575to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2576Linker Scripts}.
2577
2578@menu
2579* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2580* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2581* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2582* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2583* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2584* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2585* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2586* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2587* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2588* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2589* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2590@end menu
2591
2592@node Basic Script Concepts
2593@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2594@cindex linker script concepts
2595We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2596describe the linker script language.
2597
2598The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2599file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2600@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2601The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2602purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2603among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2604section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2605in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2606
2607Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2608also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2609contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2610the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2611A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2612area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2613loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2614which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2615of debugging information.
2616
2617Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2618first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2619the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2620@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2621section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2622same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2623is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2624(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2625based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2626RAM address would be the VMA.
2627
2628You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2629program with the @samp{-h} option.
2630
2631Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2632@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2633has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2634information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2635will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2636static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2637referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2638
2639You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2640program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2641option.
2642
2643@node Script Format
2644@section Linker Script Format
2645@cindex linker script format
2646Linker scripts are text files.
2647
2648You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2649either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2650symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2651generally ignored.
2652
2653Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2654If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2655otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2656double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2657file name.
2658
2659You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2660@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2661to whitespace.
2662
2663@node Simple Example
2664@section Simple Linker Script Example
2665@cindex linker script example
2666@cindex example of linker script
2667Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2668
2669The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2670@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2671memory layout of the output file.
2672
2673The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2674describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2675code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2676@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2677Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2678your input files.
2679
2680For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
26810x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2682linker script which will do that:
2683@smallexample
2684SECTIONS
2685@{
2686 . = 0x10000;
2687 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2688 . = 0x8000000;
2689 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2690 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2691@}
2692@end smallexample
2693
2694You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2695followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2696descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2697
252b5132
RH
2698The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2699sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2700counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2701other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2702current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2703incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2704@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2705
2706The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2707required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2708after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2709which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2710wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2711means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2712
2713Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2714@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2715@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2716
2717The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2718the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2719at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2720output section, the value of the location counter will be
2721@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2722effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2723immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2724
2725The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2726alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2727example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2728sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2729may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2730sections.
2731
2732That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2733
2734@node Simple Commands
2735@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2736@cindex linker script simple commands
2737In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2738
2739@menu
2740* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2741* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2742@ifclear SingleFormat
2743* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2744@end ifclear
2745
2746* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2747@end menu
2748
2749@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2750@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2751@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2752@cindex start of execution
2753@cindex first instruction
2754@cindex entry point
2755The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2756point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2757entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2758@smallexample
2759ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2760@end smallexample
2761
2762There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2763entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2764stopping when one of them succeeds:
2765@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2766@item
252b5132 2767the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2768@item
252b5132 2769the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2770@item
252b5132 2771the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2772@item
252b5132 2773the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2774@item
252b5132
RH
2775The address @code{0}.
2776@end itemize
2777
2778@node File Commands
36f63dca 2779@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2780@cindex linker script file commands
2781Several linker script commands deal with files.
2782
2783@table @code
2784@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2785@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2786@cindex including a linker script
2787Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2788be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2789with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
279010 levels deep.
2791
4006703d
NS
2792You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2793@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2794
252b5132
RH
2795@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2796@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2797@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2798@cindex input files in linker scripts
2799@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2800@cindex linker script input object files
2801The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2802in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2803
2804For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2805a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2806then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2807
2808In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2809script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2810
e3f2db7f
AO
2811In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2812with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2813located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2814for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2815open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2816linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2817description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2818
ff5dcc92 2819If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2820name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2821@samp{-l}.
2822
2823When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2824files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2825script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2826
2827@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2828@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2829@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2830@cindex grouping input files
2831The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2832files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2833new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2834in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2835
b717d30e
JJ
2836@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2837@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2838@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2839This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2840commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2841as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2842with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2843when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2844@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2845and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2846setting afterwards.
2847
252b5132
RH
2848@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2849@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2850@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2851The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2852@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2853@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2854Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2855precedence.
2856
2857You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2858output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2859
2860@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2861@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2862@cindex library search path in linker script
2863@cindex archive search path in linker script
2864@cindex search path in linker script
2865The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2866@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2867@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2868on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2869are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2870the command line option are searched first.
2871
2872@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2873@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2874@cindex first input file
2875The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2876that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2877though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2878when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2879first file.
2880@end table
2881
2882@ifclear SingleFormat
2883@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2884@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2885A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2886
2887@table @code
2888@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2889@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2890@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2891@cindex output file format in linker script
2892The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2893output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2894exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2895(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2896line option takes precedence.
2897
2898You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2899formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2900This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2901desired endianness.
2902
2903If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2904will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2905output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2906used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2907
2908For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2909command:
2910@smallexample
2911OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2912@end smallexample
2913This says that the default format for the output file is
2914@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2915option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2916format.
2917
2918@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2919@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2920@cindex input file format in linker script
2921The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2922files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2923This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2924(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2925is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2926command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2927@end table
2928@end ifclear
2929
2930@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 2931@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
2932There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2933
2934@table @code
2935@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
2936@kindex ASSERT
2937@cindex assertion in linker script
2938Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
2939with an error code, and print @var{message}.
2940
2941@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
2942@kindex EXTERN
2943@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
2944Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2945symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2946modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
2947each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
2948command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
2949
2950@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2951@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2952@cindex common allocation in linker script
2953This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 2954to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
2955output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
2956
4818e05f
AM
2957@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2958@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2959@cindex common allocation in linker script
2960This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
2961command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
2962to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2963
53d25da6
AM
2964@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
2965@kindex INSERT
2966@cindex insert user script into default script
2967This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
2968augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
2969inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2970@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
2971default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2972sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
2973linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
2974insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
2975linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
2976default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
2977of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
2978to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
2979is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
2980
2981@smallexample
2982SECTIONS
2983@{
2984 OVERLAY :
2985 @{
2986 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
2987 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
2988 @}
2989@}
2990INSERT AFTER .text;
2991@end smallexample
2992
252b5132
RH
2993@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
2994@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
2995@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 2996This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
2997references among certain output sections.
2998
2999In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3000using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3001will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3002errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3003a function defined in the other section.
3004
3005The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3006@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3007an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3008@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3009names.
3010
3011@ifclear SingleFormat
3012@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3013@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3014@cindex machine architecture
3015@cindex architecture
3016Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3017of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3018architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3019the @samp{-f} option.
3020@end ifclear
3021@end table
3022
3023@node Assignments
3024@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3025@cindex assignment in scripts
3026@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3027@cindex variables, defining
3028You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3029the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3030
3031@menu
3032* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3033* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3034* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3035* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3036@end menu
3037
3038@node Simple Assignments
3039@subsection Simple Assignments
3040
3041You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3042
3043@table @code
3044@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3045@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3046@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3047@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3048@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3049@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3050@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3051@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3052@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3053@end table
3054
3055The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3056@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3057defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3058
3059The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3060may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3061
3062The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3063
3064Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3065
3066You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3067statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3068section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3069
3070The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3071expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3072
3073Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3074assignments may be used:
3075
3076@smallexample
3077floating_point = 0;
3078SECTIONS
3079@{
3080 .text :
3081 @{
3082 *(.text)
3083 _etext = .;
3084 @}
156e34dd 3085 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3086 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3087@}
3088@end smallexample
3089@noindent
3090In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3091zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3092the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3093defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3094upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3095
3096@node PROVIDE
3097@subsection PROVIDE
3098@cindex PROVIDE
3099In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3100only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3101the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3102@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3103@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3104@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3105@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3106@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3107
3108Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3109@smallexample
3110SECTIONS
3111@{
3112 .text :
3113 @{
3114 *(.text)
3115 _etext = .;
3116 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3117 @}
3118@}
3119@end smallexample
3120
3121In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3122underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3123the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3124underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3125If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3126linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3127
7af8e998
L
3128@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3129@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3130@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3131Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3132hidden and won't be exported.
3133
73ae6183
NC
3134@node Source Code Reference
3135@subsection Source Code Reference
3136
3137Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3138intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3139a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3140symbol that does not have a value.
3141
3142Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3143transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3144stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3145prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3146mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3147of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3148variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3149linker script variable might be referred to as:
3150
3151@smallexample
3152 extern int foo;
3153@end smallexample
3154
3155But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3156
3157@smallexample
3158 _foo = 1000;
3159@end smallexample
3160
3161In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3162transformation has taken place.
3163
3164When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3165things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3166in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3167second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3168table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3169contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3170value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3171
3172@smallexample
3173 int foo = 1000;
3174@end smallexample
3175
3176creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3177holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3178number 1000 is initially stored.
3179
3180When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3181first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3182memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3183So:
3184
3185@smallexample
3186 foo = 1;
3187@end smallexample
3188
3189looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3190associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3191address. Whereas:
3192
3193@smallexample
3194 int * a = & foo;
3195@end smallexample
3196
3197looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3198and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3199the variable @samp{a}.
3200
3201Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3202the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3203an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3204
3205@smallexample
3206 foo = 1000;
3207@end smallexample
3208
3209creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3210the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3211address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3212linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3213access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3214
3215Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3216you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3217use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3218section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3219linker script contains these declarations:
3220
3221@smallexample
3222@group
3223 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3224 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3225 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3226@end group
3227@end smallexample
3228
3229Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3230
3231@smallexample
3232@group
3233 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3234
73ae6183
NC
3235 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3236@end group
3237@end smallexample
3238
3239Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3240
252b5132 3241@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3242@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3243@kindex SECTIONS
3244The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3245into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3246
3247The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3248@smallexample
3249SECTIONS
3250@{
3251 @var{sections-command}
3252 @var{sections-command}
3253 @dots{}
3254@}
3255@end smallexample
3256
3257Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3258
3259@itemize @bullet
3260@item
3261an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3262@item
3263a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3264@item
3265an output section description
3266@item
3267an overlay description
3268@end itemize
3269
3270The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3271@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3272those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3273understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3274the layout of the output file.
3275
3276Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3277below.
3278
3279If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3280linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3281section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3282input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3283example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3284in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3285
3286@menu
3287* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3288* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3289* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3290* Input Section:: Input section description
3291* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3292* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3293* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3294* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3295* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3296@end menu
3297
3298@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3299@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3300The full description of an output section looks like this:
3301@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3302@group
7e7d5768 3303@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3304 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3305 @{
3306 @var{output-section-command}
3307 @var{output-section-command}
3308 @dots{}
562d3460 3309 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3310@end group
3311@end smallexample
3312
3313Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3314
3315The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3316name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3317The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3318
3319Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3320
3321@itemize @bullet
3322@item
3323a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3324@item
3325an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3326@item
3327data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3328@item
3329a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3330@end itemize
3331
3332@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3333@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3334@cindex name, section
3335@cindex section name
3336The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3337meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3338support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3339must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3340example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3341output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3342names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3343quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3344characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3345commas must be quoted.
3346
3347The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3348Discarding}.
3349
3350@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3351@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3352@cindex address, section
3353@cindex section address
3354The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3355address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3356the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3357based on the current value of the location counter.
3358
3359If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3360set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3361@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3362current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3363requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3364output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3365within the output section.
3366
3367For example,
3368@smallexample
3369.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3370@end smallexample
3371@noindent
3372and
3373@smallexample
3374.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3375@end smallexample
3376@noindent
3377are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3378@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3379counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3380counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3381section.
3382
3383The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3384For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3385so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3386do something like this:
3387@smallexample
3388.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3389@end smallexample
3390@noindent
3391This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3392aligned upward to the specified value.
3393
3394Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3395location counter.
3396
3397@node Input Section
36f63dca 3398@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3399@cindex input sections
3400@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3401The most common output section command is an input section description.
3402
3403The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3404You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3405in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3406map the input files into your memory layout.
3407
3408@menu
3409* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3410* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3411* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3412* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3413* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3414@end menu
3415
3416@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3417@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3418@cindex input section basics
3419An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3420by a list of section names in parentheses.
3421
3422The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3423describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3424
3425The most common input section description is to include all input
3426sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3427include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3428@smallexample
3429*(.text)
3430@end smallexample
3431@noindent
18625d54
CM
3432Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3433of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3434match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3435example:
252b5132 3436@smallexample
b4346c09 3437*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3438@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3439will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3440@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3441
3442There are two ways to include more than one section:
3443@smallexample
3444*(.text .rdata)
3445*(.text) *(.rdata)
3446@end smallexample
3447@noindent
3448The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3449@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3450first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3451they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3452@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3453@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3454
3455You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3456You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3457needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3458@smallexample
3459data.o(.data)
3460@end smallexample
3461
967928e9
AM
3462You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3463matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3464with no whitespace around the colon.
3465
3466@table @samp
3467@item archive:file
3468matches file within archive
3469@item archive:
3470matches the whole archive
3471@item :file
3472matches file but not one in an archive
3473@end table
3474
3475Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3476wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3477single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3478@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3479within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3480also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3481other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3482from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3483command.
3484
252b5132
RH
3485If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3486the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3487commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3488@smallexample
3489data.o
3490@end smallexample
3491
967928e9
AM
3492When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3493and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3494characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3495name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3496did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3497though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3498@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3499the archive search path.
3500
3501@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3502@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3503@cindex input section wildcards
3504@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3505@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3506@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3507In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3508name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3509
3510The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3511pattern for the file name.
3512
3513The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3514
3515@table @samp
3516@item *
3517matches any number of characters
3518@item ?
3519matches any single character
3520@item [@var{chars}]
3521matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3522character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3523@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3524@item \
3525quotes the following character
3526@end table
3527
3528When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3529will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3530Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3531exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3532@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3533a @samp{/} character.
3534
3535File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3536specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3537does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3538
3539If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3540appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3541will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3542sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3543@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3544@smallexample
3545.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3546.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3547@end smallexample
3548
bcaa7b3e 3549@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3550Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3551in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3552this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3553pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3554@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3555into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3556
bcaa7b3e
L
3557@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3558@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3559difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3560ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3561
3562@cindex SORT
3563@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3564
3565When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3566can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3567
3568@enumerate
3569@item
3570@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3571It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3572sections have the same name.
3573@item
3574@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3575It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3576sections have the same alignment.
3577@item
c0065db7 3578@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3579treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3580@item
3581@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3582is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3583@item
3584All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3585@end enumerate
3586
3587When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3588section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3589takes precedence over the command line option.
3590
3591If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3592command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3593treated as nested sorting command.
3594
3595@enumerate
3596@item
3597@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3598@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3599@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3600@item
3601@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3602@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3603@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3604@end enumerate
3605
3606If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3607command line option will be ignored.
3608
252b5132
RH
3609If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3610@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3611precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3612
3613This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3614files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3615sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3616The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3617with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3618linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3619@smallexample
3620@group
3621SECTIONS @{
3622 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3623 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3624 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3625 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3626@}
3627@end group
3628@end smallexample
3629
3630@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3631@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3632@cindex common symbol placement
3633@cindex uninitialized data placement
3634A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3635file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3636linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3637named @samp{COMMON}.
3638
3639You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3640other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3641particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3642input files are placed in another section.
3643
3644In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3645@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3646@smallexample
3647.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3648@end smallexample
3649
3650@cindex scommon section
3651@cindex small common symbols
3652Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3653example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3654symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3655different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3656the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3657symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3658to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3659locations.
3660
3661@cindex [COMMON]
3662You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3663notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3664@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3665
3666@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3667@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3668@cindex KEEP
3669@cindex garbage collection
3670When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3671it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3672This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3673with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3674@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3675
3676@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3677@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3678The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3679to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3680start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3681@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3682follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3683@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3684@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3685All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3686files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3687
3688@smallexample
3689@group
3690SECTIONS @{
3691 outputa 0x10000 :
3692 @{
3693 all.o
3694 foo.o (.input1)
3695 @}
36f63dca
NC
3696@end group
3697@group
252b5132
RH
3698 outputb :
3699 @{
3700 foo.o (.input2)
3701 foo1.o (.input1)
3702 @}
36f63dca
NC
3703@end group
3704@group
252b5132
RH
3705 outputc :
3706 @{
3707 *(.input1)
3708 *(.input2)
3709 @}
3710@}
3711@end group
a1ab1d2a 3712@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3713
3714@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3715@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3716@cindex data
3717@cindex section data
3718@cindex output section data
3719@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3720@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3721@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3722@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3723@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3724You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3725@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3726an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3727parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3728value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3729counter.
3730
3731The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3732store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3733bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3734stored.
3735
3736For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3737of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3738@smallexample
3739BYTE(1)
3740LONG(addr)
3741@end smallexample
3742
3743When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3744same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3745target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3746@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3747@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3748
3749If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3750which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3751When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3752true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3753endianness of the first input object file.
3754
36f63dca 3755Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3756between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3757@smallexample
3758SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3759@end smallexample
3760whereas this will work:
3761@smallexample
3762SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3763@end smallexample
3764
252b5132
RH
3765@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3766@cindex holes, filling
3767@cindex unspecified memory
3768You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3769current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3770otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3771gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3772with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3773necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3774point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3775than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3776different parts of an output section.
3777
3778This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3779value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3780@smallexample
563e308f 3781FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3782@end smallexample
3783
3784The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3785section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3786part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3787entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3788precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3789expression.
252b5132
RH
3790
3791@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3792@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3793There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3794commands.
3795
3796@table @code
3797@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3798@cindex input filename symbols
3799@cindex filename symbols
3800@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3801The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
3802The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
3803file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
3804the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
3805
3806This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
3807normally used for any other object file format.
3808
3809@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
3810@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
3811@cindex constructors, arranging in link
3812@item CONSTRUCTORS
3813When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3814unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3815destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
3816arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3817automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
3818For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
3819linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
3820@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
3821ignored for other object file formats.
3822
3823The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
3824constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
3825Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
3826the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
3827first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
3828of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
3829compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
3830formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
3831@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
3832the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
3833destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
3834@code{exit}.
3835
3836For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
3837arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
3838addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
3839and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
3840linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
3841runtime code expects to see.
3842
3843@smallexample
3844 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3845 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3846 *(.ctors)
3847 LONG(0)
3848 __CTOR_END__ = .;
3849 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3850 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3851 *(.dtors)
3852 LONG(0)
3853 __DTOR_END__ = .;
3854@end smallexample
3855
3856If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
3857which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
3858are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
3859are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
3860command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
3861@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
3862@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
3863@samp{*(.dtors)}.
3864
3865Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
3866and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
3867need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
3868scripts.
3869
3870@end table
3871
3872@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 3873@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
3874@cindex discarding sections
3875@cindex sections, discarding
3876@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
3877The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
3878for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
3879be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 3880@smallexample
49c13adb 3881.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
3882@end smallexample
3883@noindent
3884will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
3885@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
3886sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
3887space in an output section will also create the output section.
3888
a0976ea4 3889The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
3890on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
3891symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
3892the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3893section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
3894
3895@cindex /DISCARD/
3896The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
3897input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3898section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
3899
3900@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 3901@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
3902@cindex output section attributes
3903We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3904like this:
3905@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3906@group
7e7d5768 3907@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3908 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3909 @{
3910 @var{output-section-command}
3911 @var{output-section-command}
3912 @dots{}
562d3460 3913 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3914@end group
3915@end smallexample
3916We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
3917@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
3918remaining section attributes.
3919
a1ab1d2a 3920@menu
252b5132
RH
3921* Output Section Type:: Output section type
3922* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 3923* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 3924* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
3925* Output Section Region:: Output section region
3926* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
3927* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
3928@end menu
3929
3930@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 3931@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
3932Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
3933parentheses. The following types are defined:
3934
3935@table @code
3936@item NOLOAD
3937The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
3938loaded into memory when the program is run.
3939@item DSECT
3940@itemx COPY
3941@itemx INFO
3942@itemx OVERLAY
3943These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3944rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
3945marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3946section when the program is run.
3947@end table
3948
3949@kindex NOLOAD
3950@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
3951@cindex loading, preventing
3952The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3953the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
3954the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
3955@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
3956need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
3957@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
3958@smallexample
3959@group
3960SECTIONS @{
3961 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
3962 @dots{}
3963@}
3964@end group
3965@end smallexample
3966
3967@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 3968@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 3969@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
3970@kindex AT(@var{lma})
3971@cindex load address
3972@cindex section load address
3973Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3974@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
3975an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
3976Address}).
3977
dc0b6aa0
AM
3978The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
3979the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
3980
3981Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
3982specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
3983Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
3984linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
3985
3986If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
3987section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
3988VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
3989section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
3990or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
3991to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 3992@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
3993
3994@cindex ROM initialized data
3995@cindex initialized data in ROM
3996This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
3997example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3998called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
3999@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4000even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4001uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4002defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4003counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4004
4005@smallexample
4006@group
4007SECTIONS
4008 @{
4009 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4010 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4011 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4012 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4013 .bss 0x3000 :
4014 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4015@}
4016@end group
4017@end smallexample
4018
4019The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4020this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4021the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4022how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4023script.
4024
4025@smallexample
4026@group
4027extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4028char *src = &_etext;
4029char *dst = &_data;
4030
4031/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4032while (dst < &_edata) @{
4033 *dst++ = *src++;
4034@}
4035
4036/* Zero bss */
4037for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4038 *dst = 0;
4039@end group
4040@end smallexample
4041
bbf115d3
L
4042@node Forced Output Alignment
4043@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4044@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4045@cindex forcing output section alignment
4046@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4047You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4048
7e7d5768
AM
4049@node Forced Input Alignment
4050@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4051@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4052@cindex forcing input section alignment
4053@cindex input section alignment
4054You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4055SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4056sections, whether larger or smaller.
4057
252b5132 4058@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4059@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4060@kindex >@var{region}
4061@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4062@cindex memory regions and sections
4063You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4064using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4065
4066Here is a simple example:
4067@smallexample
4068@group
4069MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4070SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4071@end group
4072@end smallexample
4073
4074@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4075@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4076@kindex :@var{phdr}
4077@cindex section, assigning to program header
4078@cindex program headers and sections
4079You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4080using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4081one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4082assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4083@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4084linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4085
4086Here is a simple example:
4087@smallexample
4088@group
4089PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4090SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4091@end group
4092@end smallexample
4093
4094@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4095@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4096@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4097@cindex section fill pattern
4098@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4099You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4100@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4101(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4102within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4103alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4104necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4105of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4106an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4107fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4108other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4109pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4110expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4111
4112You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4113output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4114
4115Here is a simple example:
4116@smallexample
4117@group
563e308f 4118SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4119@end group
4120@end smallexample
4121
4122@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4123@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4124@kindex OVERLAY
4125@cindex overlays
4126An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4127are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4128the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4129copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4130required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4131can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4132than another.
4133
4134Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4135@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4136output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4137command is as follows:
4138@smallexample
4139@group
4140OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4141 @{
4142 @var{secname1}
4143 @{
4144 @var{output-section-command}
4145 @var{output-section-command}
4146 @dots{}
4147 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4148 @var{secname2}
4149 @{
4150 @var{output-section-command}
4151 @var{output-section-command}
4152 @dots{}
4153 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4154 @dots{}
4155 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4156@end group
4157@end smallexample
4158
4159Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4160section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4161section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4162those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4163except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4164sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4165
4166The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4167addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4168memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4169whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4170and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4171and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4172
4173If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4174among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4175all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4176section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4177NOCROSSREFS}.
4178
4179For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4180provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4181defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4182@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4183the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4184within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4185symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4186
4187At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4188the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4189
4190Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4191@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4192@smallexample
4193@group
4194 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4195 @{
4196 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4197 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4198 @}
4199@end group
4200@end smallexample
4201@noindent
4202This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4203address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4204@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4205following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4206@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4207@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4208
4209C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4210like the following.
4211
4212@smallexample
4213@group
4214 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4215 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4216 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4217@end group
4218@end smallexample
4219
4220Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4221everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4222example could have been written identically as follows.
4223
4224@smallexample
4225@group
4226 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4227 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4228 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4229 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4230 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4231 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4232 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4233@end group
4234@end smallexample
4235
4236@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4237@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4238@kindex MEMORY
4239@cindex memory regions
4240@cindex regions of memory
4241@cindex allocating memory
4242@cindex discontinuous memory
4243The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4244memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4245
4246The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4247memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4248may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4249can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4250set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4251regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4252around to fit into the available regions.
4253
4254A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4255command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4256you wish. The syntax is:
4257@smallexample
4258@group
a1ab1d2a 4259MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4260 @{
4261 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4262 @dots{}
4263 @}
4264@end group
4265@end smallexample
4266
4267The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4268region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4269Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4270with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4271must have a distinct name.
4272
4273@cindex memory region attributes
4274The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4275whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4276not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4277@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4278section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4279the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4280them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4281
4282The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4283@table @samp
4284@item R
4285Read-only section
4286@item W
4287Read/write section
4288@item X
4289Executable section
4290@item A
4291Allocatable section
4292@item I
4293Initialized section
4294@item L
4295Same as @samp{I}
4296@item !
4297Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4298@end table
4299
4300If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4301@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4302attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4303in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4304attributes.
4305
4306@kindex ORIGIN =
4307@kindex o =
4308@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4309The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4310the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4311cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4312abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4313@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4314
4315@kindex LENGTH =
4316@kindex len =
4317@kindex l =
4318The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4319region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4320be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4321@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4322
4323In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4324available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4325and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4326linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4327is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4328or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4329explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4330region.
4331
4332@smallexample
4333@group
a1ab1d2a 4334MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4335 @{
4336 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4337 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4338 @}
4339@end group
4340@end smallexample
4341
4342Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4343specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4344@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4345a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4346output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4347was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4348the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4349output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4350region, the linker will issue an error message.
4351
3ec57632 4352It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4353expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4354@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4355
4356@smallexample
4357@group
c0065db7 4358 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4359@end group
4360@end smallexample
4361
252b5132
RH
4362@node PHDRS
4363@section PHDRS Command
4364@kindex PHDRS
4365@cindex program headers
4366@cindex ELF program headers
4367@cindex program segments
4368@cindex segments, ELF
4369The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4370@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4371loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4372program with the @samp{-p} option.
4373
4374When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4375reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4376program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4377This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4378interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4379
4380The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4381in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4382precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4383the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4384not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4385
4386The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4387generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4388ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4389
4390This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4391@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4392
4393@smallexample
4394@group
4395PHDRS
4396@{
4397 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4398 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4399@}
4400@end group
4401@end smallexample
4402
4403The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4404of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4405header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4406with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4407must have a distinct name.
4408
4409Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4410system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4411specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4412sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4413attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4414Section Phdr}.
4415
4416It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4417merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4418repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4419contain the section.
4420
4421If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4422then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4423not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4424convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4425placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4426default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4427segment at all.
4428
4429@kindex FILEHDR
4430@kindex PHDRS
4431You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4432the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4433The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4434file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4435include the ELF program headers themselves.
4436
4437The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4438value of the keyword.
4439
4440@table @asis
4441@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4442Indicates an unused program header.
4443
4444@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4445Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4446the file.
4447
4448@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4449Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4450
4451@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4452Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4453found.
4454
4455@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4456Indicates a segment holding note information.
4457
4458@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4459A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4460ABI.
4461
4462@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4463Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4464
4465@item @var{expression}
4466An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4467be used for types not defined above.
4468@end table
4469
4470You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4471in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4472@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4473Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4474output section attribute.
4475
4476The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4477which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4478explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4479an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4480header.
4481
4482Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4483headers used on a native ELF system.
4484
4485@example
4486@group
4487PHDRS
4488@{
4489 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4490 interp PT_INTERP ;
4491 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4492 data PT_LOAD ;
4493 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4494@}
4495
4496SECTIONS
4497@{
4498 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4499 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4500 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4501 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4502 @dots{}
4503 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4504 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4505 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4506 @dots{}
4507@}
4508@end group
4509@end example
4510
4511@node VERSION
4512@section VERSION Command
4513@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4514@cindex symbol versions
4515@cindex version script
4516@cindex versions of symbols
4517The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4518only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4519symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4520a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4521shared library.
4522
4523You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4524you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4525also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4526
4527The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4528@smallexample
4529VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4530@end smallexample
4531
4532The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4533Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4534version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4535version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4536version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4537scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4538library.
4539
4540The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4541examples.
4542
4543@smallexample
4544VERS_1.1 @{
4545 global:
4546 foo1;
4547 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4548 old*;
4549 original*;
4550 new*;
252b5132
RH
4551@};
4552
4553VERS_1.2 @{
4554 foo2;
4555@} VERS_1.1;
4556
4557VERS_2.0 @{
4558 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4559 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4560 ns::*;
4561 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4562 @}
252b5132
RH
4563@} VERS_1.2;
4564@end smallexample
4565
4566This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4567version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4568The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4569a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4570of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4571symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4572is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4573in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4574However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4575name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4576
4577Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4578depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4579to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4580
4581Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4582depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4583and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4584
4585When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4586specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4587unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4588unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4589somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4590wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4591wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4592set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4593ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4594
4595The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4596they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4597could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4598However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4599
0f6bf451 4600Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4601in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4602symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4603won't.
4604
4605@smallexample
7c9c73be 4606@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4607@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4608
252b5132
RH
4609When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4610symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4611requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4612shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4613loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4614linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4615application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4616way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4617all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4618search for each symbol reference.
4619
4620The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4621doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4622that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4623functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4624the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4625required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4626that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4627versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4628the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4629
4630There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4631first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4632source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4633script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4634maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4635@smallexample
4636__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4637@end smallexample
4638@noindent
4639in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4640be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4641The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4642@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4643takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4644
4645The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4646function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4647an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4648version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4649linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4650
4651To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4652source file. Here is an example:
4653
4654@smallexample
4655__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4656__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4657__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4658__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4659@end smallexample
4660
4661In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4662unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4663example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4664@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4665
4666When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4667some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4668this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4669@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4670declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4671you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4672
4673If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4674within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4675(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4676specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4677
cb840a31
L
4678You can also specify the language in the version script:
4679
4680@smallexample
4681VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4682@end smallexample
4683
c0065db7 4684The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4685The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4686demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4687patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4688
86043bbb
MM
4689Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4690described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4691or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4692the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4693whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4694cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4695might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4696should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4697expect when you upgrade.
4698
252b5132
RH
4699@node Expressions
4700@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4701@cindex expressions
4702@cindex arithmetic
4703The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4704that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4705expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4706host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4707
4708You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4709
4710The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4711expressions.
4712
4713@menu
4714* Constants:: Constants
4715* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4716* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4717* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4718* Operators:: Operators
4719* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4720* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4721* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4722@end menu
4723
4724@node Constants
4725@subsection Constants
4726@cindex integer notation
4727@cindex constants in linker scripts
4728All constants are integers.
4729
4730As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4731octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
4732hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
4733@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
4734@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
4735value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
4736
4737@cindex scaled integers
4738@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4739@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4740@cindex suffixes for integers
4741@cindex integer suffixes
4742In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4743constant by
4744@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4745@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4746@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4747@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4748@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4749@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4750@tex
4751${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4752@end tex
4753@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
4754respectively. For example, the following
4755all refer to the same quantity:
4756
252b5132 4757@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4758_fourk_1 = 4K;
4759_fourk_2 = 4096;
4760_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 4761_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
4762@end smallexample
4763
8a308ae8
NC
4764Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
4765conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
4766
252b5132
RH
4767@node Symbols
4768@subsection Symbol Names
4769@cindex symbol names
4770@cindex names
4771@cindex quoted symbol names
4772@kindex "
4773Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4774and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4775Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4776specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4777keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4778@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4779"SECTION" = 9;
4780"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4781@end smallexample
4782
4783Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4784to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4785whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4786
ecca9871
L
4787@node Orphan Sections
4788@subsection Orphan Sections
4789@cindex orphan
4790Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4791are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4792script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4793output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4794placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4795attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4796same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4797If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4798at the end of the file.
4799
4800For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
4801well as section flag.
4802
41911f68 4803If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 4804the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
4805__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4806section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
4807orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
4808representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
4809character.
4810
252b5132
RH
4811@node Location Counter
4812@subsection The Location Counter
4813@kindex .
4814@cindex dot
4815@cindex location counter
4816@cindex current output location
4817The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
4818current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
4819location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
4820within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
4821anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4822
4823@cindex holes
4824Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
4825moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
4826location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4827and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
4828doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
4829
4830@smallexample
4831SECTIONS
4832@{
4833 output :
4834 @{
4835 file1(.text)
4836 . = . + 1000;
4837 file2(.text)
4838 . += 1000;
4839 file3(.text)
563e308f 4840 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
4841@}
4842@end smallexample
4843@noindent
4844In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
4845located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
4846followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
4847@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 4848@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
4849specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
4850
5c6bbab8
NC
4851@cindex dot inside sections
4852Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4853current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 4854statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
4855absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
4856however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
4857not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
4858
4859@smallexample
4860SECTIONS
4861@{
4862 . = 0x100
4863 .text: @{
4864 *(.text)
4865 . = 0x200
4866 @}
4867 . = 0x500
4868 .data: @{
4869 *(.data)
4870 . += 0x600
4871 @}
4872@}
4873@end smallexample
4874
4875The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
4876and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
4877the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
4878much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
4879move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
4880and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
4881the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
4882the @samp{.data} output section itself.
4883
b5666f2f
AM
4884@cindex dot outside sections
4885Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4886output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4887needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
4888
4889@smallexample
4890SECTIONS
4891@{
4892 start_of_text = . ;
4893 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4894 end_of_text = . ;
4895
4896 start_of_data = . ;
4897 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4898 end_of_data = . ;
4899@}
4900@end smallexample
4901
4902If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
4903not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
4904between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
4905should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
4906blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
4907the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
4908sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
4909statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
4910special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
4911place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
4912as follows:
4913
4914@smallexample
4915SECTIONS
4916@{
4917 start_of_text = . ;
4918 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4919 end_of_text = . ;
4920
4921 start_of_data = . ;
4922 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
4923 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4924 end_of_data = . ;
4925@}
4926@end smallexample
4927
4928This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4929@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
4930placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
4931assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
4932a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
4933section. So you could write:
4934
4935@smallexample
4936SECTIONS
4937@{
4938 start_of_text = . ;
4939 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4940 end_of_text = . ;
4941
4942 . = . ;
4943 start_of_data = . ;
4944 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4945 end_of_data = . ;
4946@}
4947@end smallexample
4948
4949Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
4950@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
4951
252b5132
RH
4952@need 2000
4953@node Operators
4954@subsection Operators
4955@cindex operators for arithmetic
4956@cindex arithmetic operators
4957@cindex precedence in expressions
4958The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4959the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4960@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4961@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4962@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4963@smallexample
4964precedence associativity Operators Notes
4965(highest)
49661 left ! - ~ (1)
49672 left * / %
49683 left + -
49694 left >> <<
49705 left == != > < <= >=
49716 left &
49727 left |
49738 left &&
49749 left ||
497510 right ? :
497611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
4977(lowest)
4978@end smallexample
4979Notes:
a1ab1d2a 4980(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
4981(2) @xref{Assignments}.
4982@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4983@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4984@tex
4985\vskip \baselineskip
4986%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
4987\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
4988\hrule
4989\halign
4990{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
4991height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4992&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
4993height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4994\noalign{\hrule}
4995height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4996&highest&&&&&\cr
4997% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 4998&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
4999&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5000&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5001&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5002&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5003&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5004&7&&left&&|&\cr
5005&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5006&9&&left&&||&\cr
5007&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5008&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5009&lowest&&&&&\cr
5010height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5011\hrule}
5012@end tex
5013@iftex
5014{
5015@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5016@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5017@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5018}
5019@end iftex
5020@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5021
5022@node Evaluation
5023@subsection Evaluation
5024@cindex lazy evaluation
5025@cindex expression evaluation order
5026The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5027an expression when absolutely necessary.
5028
5029The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5030address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5031regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5032as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5033
5034However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5035until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5036other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5037for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5038
5039The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5040assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5041allocation.
5042
5043Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5044@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5045
5046If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5047available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5048following
5049@smallexample
5050@group
5051SECTIONS
5052 @{
a1ab1d2a 5053 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5054 @{ *(.text) @}
5055 @}
5056@end group
5057@end smallexample
5058@noindent
5059will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5060address}.
5061
5062@node Expression Section
5063@subsection The Section of an Expression
5064@cindex expression sections
5065@cindex absolute expressions
5066@cindex relative expressions
5067@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5068@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5069@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5070When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5071or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5072fixed offset from the base of a section.
5073
5074The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5075whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5076an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5077section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5078
5079A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5080relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5081further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5082section will be the section of the relative expression.
5083
5084A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5085through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5086will not have any particular associated section.
5087
5088You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5089to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5090create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5091section @samp{.data}:
5092@smallexample
5093SECTIONS
5094 @{
5095 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5096 @}
5097@end smallexample
5098@noindent
5099If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5100@samp{.data} section.
5101
5102@node Builtin Functions
5103@subsection Builtin Functions
5104@cindex functions in expressions
5105The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5106use in linker script expressions.
5107
5108@table @code
5109@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5110@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5111@cindex expression, absolute
5112Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5113of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5114value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5115normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5116
5117@item ADDR(@var{section})
5118@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5119@cindex section address in expression
5120Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5121script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5122the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5123identical values:
5124@smallexample
5125@group
5126SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5127 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5128 @{
252b5132
RH
5129 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5130 @dots{}
5131 @}
5132 .output :
5133 @{
5134 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5135 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5136 @}
5137@dots{} @}
5138@end group
5139@end smallexample
5140
876f4090
NS
5141@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5142@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5143@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5144@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5145@cindex round up location counter
5146@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5147@cindex round up expression
5148@cindex align expression
5149Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5150to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5151doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5152arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5153expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5154equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5155
5156Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5157next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5158variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5159input sections:
252b5132
RH
5160@smallexample
5161@group
5162SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5163 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5164 *(.data)
5165 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5166 @}
5167@dots{} @}
5168@end group
5169@end smallexample
5170@noindent
5171The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5172a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5173a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5174of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5175
5176The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5177
362c1d1a
NS
5178@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5179@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5180@cindex section alignment
5181Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5182been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5183evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5184the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5185value in that section.
5186@smallexample
5187@group
5188SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5189 .output @{
5190 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5191 @dots{}
5192 @}
5193@dots{} @}
5194@end group
5195@end smallexample
5196
252b5132
RH
5197@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5198@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5199This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5200scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5201section.
5202
2d20f7bf
JJ
5203@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5204@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5205This is equivalent to either
5206@smallexample
5207(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5208@end smallexample
5209or
5210@smallexample
5211(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5212@end smallexample
5213@noindent
5214depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5215for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5216@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5217If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5218memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5219bytes in the on-disk file.
5220
5221This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5222any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5223@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5224be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5225working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5226
5227@noindent
5228Example:
5229@smallexample
5230 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5231@end smallexample
5232
5233@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5234@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5235This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5236evaluation purposes.
5237
5238@smallexample
5239 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5240@end smallexample
5241
a4f5ad88
JJ
5242@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5243@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5244This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5245@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5246When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5247does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5248@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5249boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5250it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5251@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5252
5253@smallexample
5254 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5255@end smallexample
5256
252b5132
RH
5257@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5258@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5259@cindex symbol defaults
5260Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5261defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5262return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5263default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5264shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5265the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5266existed, its value is preserved:
5267
5268@smallexample
5269@group
5270SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5271 .text : @{
5272 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5273 @dots{}
5274 @}
5275 @dots{}
5276@}
5277@end group
5278@end smallexample
5279
3ec57632
NC
5280@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5281@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5282Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5283
252b5132
RH
5284@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5285@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5286@cindex section load address in expression
5287Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5288the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5289attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5290Section LMA}).
5291
5292@kindex MAX
5293@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5294Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5295
5296@kindex MIN
5297@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5298Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5299
5300@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5301@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5302@cindex unallocated address, next
5303Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5304This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5305use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5306output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5307
3ec57632
NC
5308@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5309@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5310Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5311
ba916c8a
MM
5312@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5313@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5314Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5315value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5316option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5317@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5318be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5319``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5320name.
5321
252b5132
RH
5322@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5323@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5324@cindex section size
5325Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5326been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5327evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5328@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5329@smallexample
5330@group
5331SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5332 .output @{
5333 .start = . ;
5334 @dots{}
5335 .end = . ;
5336 @}
5337 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5338 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5339@dots{} @}
5340@end group
5341@end smallexample
5342
5343@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5344@itemx sizeof_headers
5345@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5346@cindex header size
5347Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5348information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5349this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5350choose, to facilitate paging.
5351
5352@cindex not enough room for program headers
5353@cindex program headers, not enough room
5354When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5355@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5356number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5357addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5358additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5359room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5360the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5361script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5362you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5363command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5364@end table
5365
5366@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5367@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5368@cindex implicit linker scripts
5369If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5370an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5371linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5372linker will report an error.
5373
5374An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5375
5376Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5377assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5378commands.
5379
5380Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5381at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5382read. This can affect archive searching.
5383
5384@ifset GENERIC
5385@node Machine Dependent
5386@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5387
5388@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5389@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5390sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5391functionality are not listed.
5392
5393@menu
36f63dca
NC
5394@ifset H8300
5395* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5396@end ifset
5397@ifset I960
5398* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5399@end ifset
5400@ifset ARM
5401* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5402@end ifset
5403@ifset HPPA
5404* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5405@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5406@ifset M68K
5407* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5408@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5409@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5410* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5411@end ifset
2469cfa2 5412@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5413* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5414@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5415@ifset M68HC11
5416* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5417@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5418@ifset POWERPC
5419* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5420@end ifset
5421@ifset POWERPC64
5422* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5423@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5424@ifset SPU
5425* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5426@end ifset
74459f0e 5427@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5428* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5429@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5430@ifset WIN32
5431* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5432@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5433@ifset XTENSA
5434* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5435@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5436@end menu
5437@end ifset
5438
252b5132
RH
5439@ifset H8300
5440@ifclear GENERIC
5441@raisesections
5442@end ifclear
5443
5444@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5445@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5446
5447@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5448For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5449you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5450
5451@table @emph
5452@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5453@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5454@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5455targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5456program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5457respectively.
5458
5459@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5460@item synthesizing instructions
5461@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5462@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5463sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5464page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5465(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5466@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5467top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5468
5469@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5470@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5471biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5472which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5473page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5474(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5475@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5476the top page of memory).
5477
5478@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5479@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
548032 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5481changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5482(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5483@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5484the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5485@end table
5486
5487@ifclear GENERIC
5488@lowersections
5489@end ifclear
5490@end ifset
5491
36f63dca 5492@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5493@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5494@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5495@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5496@node Renesas
5497@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5498
c2dcd04e
NC
5499@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5500H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5501options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5502@end ifset
5503@end ifclear
5504
5505@ifset I960
5506@ifclear GENERIC
5507@raisesections
5508@end ifclear
5509
5510@node i960
5511@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5512
5513@cindex i960 support
5514
5515You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5516specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5517family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5518incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5519linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5520libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5521search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5522
5523For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5524well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5525paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5526the names
5527
5528@smallexample
5529@group
5530try
5531libtry.a
5532tryca
5533libtryca.a
5534@end group
5535@end smallexample
5536
5537@noindent
5538The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5539two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5540
5541You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5542the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5543use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5544specifies a library.
5545
5546@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5547@cindex relaxing on i960
5548@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5549you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5550@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5551them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5552instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5553instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5554target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5555not itself call any subroutines).
5556
5557@ifclear GENERIC
5558@lowersections
5559@end ifclear
5560@end ifset
5561
5562@ifset ARM
5563@ifclear GENERIC
5564@raisesections
5565@end ifclear
5566
93fd0973
SC
5567@ifset M68HC11
5568@ifclear GENERIC
5569@raisesections
5570@end ifclear
5571
5572@node M68HC11/68HC12
5573@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5574
5575@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5576
5577@subsection Linker Relaxation
5578
5579For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5580optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5581
5582@table @emph
5583@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5584@item relaxing address modes
5585@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5586targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5587program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5588respectively.
5589
5590@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5591transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5592page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5593
5594@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5595When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5596of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5597addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5598@code{bset} instructions.
5599
5600@end table
5601
5602@subsection Trampoline Generation
5603
5604@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5605@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5606For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5607call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5608will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5609trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5610case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5611point to the function trampoline.
5612
5613@ifclear GENERIC
5614@lowersections
5615@end ifclear
5616@end ifset
5617
36f63dca 5618@node ARM
3674e28a 5619@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5620
5621@cindex ARM interworking support
5622@kindex --support-old-code
5623For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5624between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5625been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5626line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5627libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5628option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5629given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5630which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5631the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5632non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5633
5634@cindex thumb entry point
5635@cindex entry point, thumb
5636@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5637The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5638@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5639But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5640branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5641executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5642
ce11ba6c
KT
5643@cindex PE import table prefixing
5644@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5645The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5646the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5647elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5648import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5649
e489d0ae
PB
5650@cindex BE8
5651@kindex --be8
5652The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5653executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5654The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5655
3674e28a
PB
5656@cindex TARGET1
5657@kindex --target1-rel
5658@kindex --target1-abs
5659The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5660@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5661or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5662and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5663
5664@cindex TARGET2
5665@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5666The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5667@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5668meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5669@table @samp
5670@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5671@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5672@item abs
5673@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5674@item got-rel
5675@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5676@end table
5677
319850b4
JB
5678@cindex FIX_V4BX
5679@kindex --fix-v4bx
5680The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5681specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5682interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5683also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5684
5685In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5686linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5687@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5688
5689In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5690relocations are ignored.
5691
845b51d6
PB
5692@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5693@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5694Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5695relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5696
5697@smallexample
5698TST rM, #1
5699MOVEQ PC, rM
5700BX Rn
5701@end smallexample
5702
5703This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5704and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5705condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5706
33bfe774
JB
5707@cindex USE_BLX
5708@kindex --use-blx
5709The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5710BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5711situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5712code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5713each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5714
5715This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5716specify it if you are using that target.
5717
c6dd86c6
JB
5718@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5719@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5720The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5721bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5722instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5723to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5724the support code can read the intended values.
5725
5726The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5727intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5728and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5729intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5730full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5731you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5732
5733If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5734enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5735@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5736mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5737vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5738@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5739
5740If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5741potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5742such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5743first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5744instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5745the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5746are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5747
bf21ed78
MS
5748@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5749@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5750The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5751warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5752enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5753linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5754using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5755not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
5756
5757@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
5758@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
5759The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
5760warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5761@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5762linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
5763using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 5764
726150b7
NC
5765@cindex PIC_VENEER
5766@kindex --pic-veneer
5767The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5768ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5769is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5770@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5771
5772@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5773@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5774The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5775code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5776perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5777placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5778controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5779The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5780duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5781group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5782code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5783where they should be placed.
5784
5785The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5786@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5787placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed before the first
5788branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5789placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5790value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5791exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5792A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5793linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5794from the input sections.
5795
5796The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5797@samp{N = +1}.
5798
1a51c1a4
NC
5799Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5800only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5801otherwise.
5802
36f63dca
NC
5803@ifclear GENERIC
5804@lowersections
5805@end ifclear
5806@end ifset
5807
5808@ifset HPPA
5809@ifclear GENERIC
5810@raisesections
5811@end ifclear
5812
5813@node HPPA ELF32
5814@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5815@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
5816@kindex --multi-subspace
5817When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
5818import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
5819The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
5820stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
5821multiple sub-spaces.
5822
5823@cindex HPPA stub grouping
5824@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5825Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
5826stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5827@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5828sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5829a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5830the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5831conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5832prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5833A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5834branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5835@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5836@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5837detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5838positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5839
5840Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5841single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5842create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5843large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5844
5845@ifclear GENERIC
5846@lowersections
5847@end ifclear
5848@end ifset
5849
7fb9f789
NC
5850@ifset M68K
5851@ifclear GENERIC
5852@raisesections
5853@end ifclear
5854
5855@node M68K
5856@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5857
5858@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
5859@kindex --got=@var{type}
5860The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
5861The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
5862@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
5863the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
5864@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
5865entries only at non-negative offsets.
5866@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
5867entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
5868support such GOTs.
5869@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
5870output file. All GOT references from a single input object
5871file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
5872files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
5873
5874@ifclear GENERIC
5875@lowersections
5876@end ifclear
5877@end ifset
5878
36f63dca
NC
5879@ifset MMIX
5880@ifclear GENERIC
5881@raisesections
5882@end ifclear
5883
5884@node MMIX
5885@section @code{ld} and MMIX
5886For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
5887@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
5888understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
5889can translate between the two formats.
5890
5891There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
5892Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5893registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
5894equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
5895@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
5896global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
5897this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
5898symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
5899
7a2de473
HPN
5900Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
5901@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
5902The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
5903of a section.
36f63dca
NC
5904
5905Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
5906are left out from an mmo file.
5907
5908@ifclear GENERIC
5909@lowersections
5910@end ifclear
5911@end ifset
5912
5913@ifset MSP430
5914@ifclear GENERIC
5915@raisesections
5916@end ifclear
5917
5918@node MSP430
5919@section @code{ld} and MSP430
5920For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
5921will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
5922just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
5923
5924@cindex MSP430 extra sections
5925The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
5926
5927@table @code
5928@item @samp{.vectors}
5929Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5930
5931@item @samp{.bootloader}
5932Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
5933in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5934
5935@item @samp{.infomem}
5936Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
5937this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5938
c0065db7 5939@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
5940This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
5941in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5942
5943@item @samp{.noinit}
5944Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
5945
c0065db7 5946The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
5947@end table
5948
5949@ifclear GENERIC
5950@lowersections
5951@end ifclear
5952@end ifset
5953
2a60a7a8
AM
5954@ifset POWERPC
5955@ifclear GENERIC
5956@raisesections
5957@end ifclear
5958
5959@node PowerPC ELF32
5960@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5961@cindex PowerPC long branches
5962@kindex --relax on PowerPC
5963Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5964displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
5965@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
5966@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
5967the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
5968section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
5969section exceeds 33M in size.
5970
5971@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
5972@table @option
5973@cindex PowerPC PLT
5974@kindex --bss-plt
5975@item --bss-plt
5976Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
5977generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
5978the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5979writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
5980@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
5981PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5982compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
5983BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5984
016687f8
AM
5985@kindex --secure-plt
5986@item --secure-plt
5987@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5988@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
5989when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5990layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
5991style BSS PLT.
5992
2a60a7a8
AM
5993@cindex PowerPC GOT
5994@kindex --sdata-got
5995@item --sdata-got
5996The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5997sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
5998@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
5999section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6000@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6001@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6002@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6003@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6004PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6005pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6006GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6007really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6008
6009@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6010@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6011@item --emit-stub-syms
6012This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6013symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6014
6015@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6016@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6017@item --no-tls-optimize
6018PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6019sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6020disable the optimization.
6021@end table
6022
6023@ifclear GENERIC
6024@lowersections
6025@end ifclear
6026@end ifset
6027
6028@ifset POWERPC64
6029@ifclear GENERIC
6030@raisesections
6031@end ifclear
6032
6033@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6034@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6035
6036@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6037@table @option
6038@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6039@kindex --stub-group-size
6040@item --stub-group-size
6041Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6042by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6043@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6044sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6045a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6046the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6047conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6048prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6049A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6050branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6051@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6052@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6053detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6054positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6055
6056Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6057single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6058create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6059large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6060
6061@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6062@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6063@item --emit-stub-syms
6064This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6065symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6066
6067@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6068@kindex --dotsyms
6069@kindex --no-dotsyms
6070@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6071These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6072in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6073function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6074code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6075properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6076to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6077@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6078dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6079feature.
6080
6081@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6082@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6083@item --no-tls-optimize
6084PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6085sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6086disable the optimization.
6087
6088@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6089@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6090@item --no-opd-optimize
6091PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6092corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6093the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6094Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6095
6096@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6097@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6098@item --non-overlapping-opd
6099Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6100@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6101the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6102entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6103
6104@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6105@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6106@item --no-toc-optimize
6107PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6108entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6109reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6110marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6111marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6112relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6113unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6114reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6115discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6116reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6117code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6118optimization.
6119
6120@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6121@kindex --no-multi-toc
6122@item --no-multi-toc
6123By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6124entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6125total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6126grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6127TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6128calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6129help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
613064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6131Use this option to turn off this feature.
6132@end table
6133
6134@ifclear GENERIC
6135@lowersections
6136@end ifclear
6137@end ifset
6138
49fa1e15
AM
6139@ifset SPU
6140@ifclear GENERIC
6141@raisesections
6142@end ifclear
6143
6144@node SPU ELF
6145@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6146
6147@cindex SPU ELF options
6148@table @option
6149
6150@cindex SPU plugins
6151@kindex --plugin
6152@item --plugin
6153This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6154
6155@cindex SPU overlays
6156@kindex --no-overlays
6157@item --no-overlays
6158Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6159regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6160@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6161turns off all this special overlay handling.
6162
6163@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6164@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6165@item --emit-stub-syms
6166This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6167symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6168
6169@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6170@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6171@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6172This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6173function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6174on calls to non-overlay regions.
6175
6176@cindex SPU local store size
6177@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6178@item --local-store=lo:hi
6179@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6180the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6181range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6182
c0065db7 6183@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6184@kindex --stack-analysis
6185@item --stack-analysis
6186SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6187unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6188under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6189@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6190@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6191determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6192for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6193for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6194for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6195find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6196and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6197under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6198dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6199is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6200and calls will be given.
6201
c0065db7 6202@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6203@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6204@item --emit-stack-syms
6205This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6206in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6207These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6208functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6209functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6210such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6211The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6212@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6213@end table
6214
6215@ifclear GENERIC
6216@lowersections
6217@end ifclear
6218@end ifset
6219
36f63dca
NC
6220@ifset TICOFF
6221@ifclear GENERIC
6222@raisesections
6223@end ifclear
6224
6225@node TI COFF
6226@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6227@cindex TI COFF versions
6228@kindex --format=@var{version}
6229The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6230TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6231also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6232format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6233header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6234
6235@ifclear GENERIC
6236@lowersections
6237@end ifclear
6238@end ifset
6239
2ca22b03
NC
6240@ifset WIN32
6241@ifclear GENERIC
6242@raisesections
6243@end ifclear
6244
6245@node WIN32
6246@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6247
c0065db7 6248This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6249See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6250command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6251
6252@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6253@cindex import libraries
6254@item import libraries
69da35b5 6255The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6256libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6257regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6258archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6259support for creating such libraries provided with the
6260@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6261
c0065db7
RM
6262@item exporting DLL symbols
6263@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6264The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6265
6266@table @emph
6267@item using auto-export functionality
6268@cindex using auto-export functionality
6269By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6270which is controlled by the following command line options:
6271
0a5d968e
NC
6272@itemize
6273@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6274@item --exclude-symbols
6275@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6276@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
0a5d968e
NC
6277@end itemize
6278
c0065db7 6279If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6280command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6281if either of the following are true:
6282
6283@itemize
6284@item A DEF file is used.
6285@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6286@end itemize
dc8465bf 6287
c0065db7
RM
6288@item using a DEF file
6289@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6290Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6291an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6292exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6293name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6294command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6295
6296@example
6297gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6298@end example
6299
0a5d968e
NC
6300Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6301@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6302
dc8465bf
NC
6303Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6304
6305@example
4b5bd4e7 6306LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6307
6308EXPORTS
6309foo
6310bar
6311_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6312another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6313var1 DATA
c0065db7 6314@end example
dc8465bf 6315
4b5bd4e7
DS
6316This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6317symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6318alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6319by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6320@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6321@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6322
6b31ad16
DS
6323The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6324name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6325the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6326
b45619c0
NC
6327When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6328library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6329@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6330executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6331
6332With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6333specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6334non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6335
6336If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6337or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6338filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6339
4b5bd4e7
DS
6340The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6341
6342@example
6343EXPORTS
6344 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6345 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6346 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6347@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6348
6349Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6350@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6351@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6352@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6353Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6354@samp{<integer>} alias.
6355
6356The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6357
6358@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6359will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6360by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6361linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6362library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6363
6364@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6365The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6366the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6367@code{*_imp__foo}).
6368
6369@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6370well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6371read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6372variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6373the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6374extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6375application will behave unexpectedly.
6376
6377@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6378it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6379symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6380API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6381the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6382
4b5bd4e7
DS
6383See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6384other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6385
6386@cindex creating a DEF file
6387While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6388with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6389
6390@item Using decorations
6391@cindex Using decorations
6392Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6393itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6394declared as:
6395
6396@example
6397__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6398__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6399@end example
6400
6401All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6402any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6403this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6404the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6405
6406Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6407decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6408instead:
6409
6410@example
6411__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6412__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6413@end example
6414
c0065db7
RM
6415This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6416when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6417variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6418code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6419of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6420omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6421@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6422information.
c0065db7 6423@end table
dc8465bf 6424
2ca22b03
NC
6425@cindex automatic data imports
6426@item automatic data imports
6427The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6428by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6429compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6430issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6431code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6432c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6433initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6434decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6435platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6436command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6437The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6438suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6439trigger the feature's use.
6440
c0065db7 6441auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6442additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6443
c0065db7 6444"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6445documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6446
c0065db7
RM
6447The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6448occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6449One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6450below.
6451
6452@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6453For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6454object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6455offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6456field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6457in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6458without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6459The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6460references.
6461
c0065db7
RM
6462The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6463be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6464themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6465runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6466compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6467support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6468run without error on an older system.
6469
c0065db7
RM
6470@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6471enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6472
6473@cindex direct linking to a dll
6474@item direct linking to a dll
6475The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6476including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6477libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6478traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6479libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6480function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6481though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6482storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6483tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6484large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6485
c0065db7 6486Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6487@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6488of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6489perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6490select the dll instead of an import library.
6491
2ca22b03 6492
69da35b5
NC
6493For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6494to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6495
6496@example
45e948fe
NC
6497libxxx.dll.a
6498xxx.dll.a
6499libxxx.a
6500xxx.lib
69da35b5 6501cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6502libxxx.dll
6503xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6504@end example
6505
69da35b5
NC
6506before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6507
c0065db7
RM
6508(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6509where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6510@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6511file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6512@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6513
c0065db7
RM
6514Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6515@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6516was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6517various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6518could coexist on the same machine.
6519
2ca22b03
NC
6520The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6521applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6522libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6523
6524@example
6525bin/
6526 cygxxx.dll
6527lib/
6528 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6529 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6530@end example
6531
c0065db7
RM
6532Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6533done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6534
65351. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6536@example
6537gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6538@end example
2ca22b03 6539
69da35b5
NC
6540However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6541(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6542@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6543not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6544
2ca22b03
NC
65452. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6546directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6547should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6548making the app/dll.
6549
6550@example
6551ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6552@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6553
6554Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6555
6556@example
6557gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6558@end example
69da35b5
NC
6559
6560This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6561perfectly legal
6562
6563@example
6564bin/
6565 cygxxx-5.dll
6566lib/
c0065db7 6567 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6568@end example
6569
dc8465bf 6570Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6571even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6572@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6573
6574Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6575wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6576
65771. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6578work with auto-imported data.
6579
dc8465bf
NC
65802. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6581import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6582symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6583for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6584possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6585
45e948fe
NC
65863. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6587critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6588in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6589stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6590
69da35b5 6591So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6592true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6593a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6594binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6595massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6596requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6597will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6598
c0065db7 6599@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6600@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6601@item adding additional names
6602Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6603A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6604exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6605when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6606import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6607
c0065db7 6608@example
dc8465bf
NC
6609LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6610
6611EXPORTS
c0065db7 6612foo
dc8465bf 6613_foo = foo
c0065db7 6614@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6615
6616The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6617
6618Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6619source code using the "weak" attribute:
6620
c0065db7
RM
6621@example
6622void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6623void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6624@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6625
6626See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6627symbols.
6628
6629@item renaming symbols
6630Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6631kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6632@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6633DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6634created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6635
c0065db7 6636@example
dc8465bf
NC
6637LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6638
6639EXPORTS
6640_foo = foo
c0065db7 6641@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6642
6643The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6644@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6645@end table
dc8465bf 6646
0a5d968e 6647Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6648unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6649If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6650@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6651that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6652@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6653renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6654to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6655the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6656In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6657which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6658
6659@cindex weak externals
6660@item weak externals
6661The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6662weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6663defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6664are three variants of weak externals:
6665@itemize
6666@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6667called lazy externals.
6668@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6669This form is not presently implemented.
6670@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6671implemented.
6672@end itemize
6673As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6674are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6675uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6676@end table
6677
6678@ifclear GENERIC
6679@lowersections
6680@end ifclear
6681@end ifset
6682
e0001a05
NC
6683@ifset XTENSA
6684@ifclear GENERIC
6685@raisesections
6686@end ifclear
6687
6688@node Xtensa
6689@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6690
6691@cindex Xtensa processors
6692The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6693@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6694specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6695keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6696example, with the command:
6697
6698@smallexample
6699SECTIONS
6700@{
6701 .text : @{
6702 *(.literal .text)
6703 @}
6704@}
6705@end smallexample
6706
6707@noindent
6708@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6709and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6710literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6711interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6712group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6713files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6714and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6715
43cd72b9 6716@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6717@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6718Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6719provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6720is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6721literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6722will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6723location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6724the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6725unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6726@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6727range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6728
6729For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6730to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6731instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6732instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6733instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6734@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6735hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6736By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6737switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6738density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6739instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6740performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6741linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6742a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6743
6744The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6745control the linker:
6746
6747@cindex Xtensa options
6748@table @option
e0001a05 6749@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6750@item --no-relax
6751Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6752by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6753relaxation.
6754
6755@item --size-opt
6756When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6757more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6758no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6759alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6760preserve the correctness of the code.
6761@end table
e0001a05
NC
6762
6763@ifclear GENERIC
6764@lowersections
6765@end ifclear
6766@end ifset
6767
252b5132
RH
6768@ifclear SingleFormat
6769@node BFD
6770@chapter BFD
6771
6772@cindex back end
6773@cindex object file management
6774@cindex object formats available
6775@kindex objdump -i
6776The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6777These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6778object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6779format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6780it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6781associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6782object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6783(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6784list all the formats available for your configuration.
6785
6786@cindex BFD requirements
6787@cindex requirements for BFD
6788As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6789several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6790BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6791formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6792been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6793BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6794may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6795
6796One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6797mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6798useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6799conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
6800
6801@menu
6802* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
6803@end menu
6804
6805@node BFD outline
36f63dca 6806@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
6807@cindex opening object files
6808@include bfdsumm.texi
6809@end ifclear
6810
6811@node Reporting Bugs
6812@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
6813@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
6814@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 6815
ff5dcc92 6816Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
6817
6818Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
6819it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 6820to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 6821work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 6822@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6823
6824In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6825information that enables us to fix the bug.
6826
6827@menu
6828* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
6829* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
6830@end menu
6831
6832@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 6833@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
6834@cindex bug criteria
6835
6836If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
6837
6838@itemize @bullet
6839@cindex fatal signal
6840@cindex linker crash
6841@cindex crash of linker
6842@item
6843If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 6844@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
6845
6846@cindex error on valid input
6847@item
ff5dcc92 6848If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
6849
6850@cindex invalid input
6851@item
ff5dcc92 6852If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
6853may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6854object files are correct.
6855
6856@item
6857If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 6858improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
6859@end itemize
6860
6861@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 6862@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 6863@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 6864@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
6865
6866A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 6867products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
6868recommend you contact that organization first.
6869
6870You can find contact information for many support companies and
6871individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
6872distribution.
6873
ad22bfe8 6874@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 6875Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
6876@value{BUGURL}.
6877@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6878
6879The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6880@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
6881fact or leave it out, state it!
6882
6883Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6884problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
6885assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
6886matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
6887the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
6888location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
6889were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
6890into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
6891specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 6892and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
6893
6894Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6895the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
6896on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
6897
6898Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
6899bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
6900respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
6901You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
6902
6903To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6904
6905@itemize @bullet
6906@item
ff5dcc92 6907The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
6908the @samp{--version} argument.
6909
6910Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 6911the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6912
6913@item
ff5dcc92 6914Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
6915patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
6916
6917@item
6918The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
6919version number.
6920
6921@item
ff5dcc92 6922What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
6923``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
6924
6925@item
6926The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6927observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
6928list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
6929sufficient.
6930
6931If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
6932and then we might not encounter the bug.
6933
6934@item
6935A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
6936bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
6937provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
6938bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
6939state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
6940requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
6941we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
6942attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
6943
6944If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
6945@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6946object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6947@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
6948how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
6949
6950@item
6951A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6952incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
6953
ff5dcc92 6954Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
6955will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
6956not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
6957a chance to make a mistake.
6958
6959Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
6960say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 6961copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
6962C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
6963and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
6964fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
6965you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
6966any conclusion from our observations.
6967
6968@item
ff5dcc92 6969If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
6970diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
6971@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 6972If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
6973context, not by line number.
6974
6975The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
6976sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
6977@end itemize
6978
6979Here are some things that are not necessary:
6980
6981@itemize @bullet
6982@item
6983A description of the envelope of the bug.
6984
6985Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6986which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6987changes will not affect it.
6988
6989This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
6990will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
6991with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
6992We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6993
6994Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
6995of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
6996output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6997less time, and so on.
6998
6999However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7000report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7001
7002@item
7003A patch for the bug.
7004
7005A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7006the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7007a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7008to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7009
ff5dcc92 7010Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7011construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7012through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7013able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7014fixed.
7015
7016And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7017patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7018help us to understand.
7019
7020@item
7021A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7022
7023Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7024things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7025@end itemize
7026
7027@node MRI
7028@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7029@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7030To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7031linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7032alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7033described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7034simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7035@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7036linker commands; these commands are described here.
7037
7038In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7039file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7040features to make use of them.
7041
7042You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7043@samp{-c} command-line option.
7044
7045Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7046command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7047blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7048MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7049issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7050
7051Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7052
7053You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7054lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7055The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7056
7057@table @code
7058@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7059@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7060@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7061Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7062the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7063@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7064your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7065script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7066commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7067input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7068@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7069
7070@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7071@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7072Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7073in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7074
7075@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7076
7077@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7078@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7079Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7080@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7081
7082@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7083@item BASE @var{expression}
7084Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7085absolute addresses) in the output file.
7086
7087@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7088@item CHIP @var{expression}
7089@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7090This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7091
7092@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7093@item END
7094This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7095
7096@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7097@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7098Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7099language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7100
7101@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7102@item
252b5132
RH
7103S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7104
7105@item
7106IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7107
7108@item
7109COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7110@samp{COFF}
7111@end enumerate
7112
7113@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7114@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7115Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7116@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7117
7118The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7119same line, with no change in its effect.
7120
7121@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7122@item LOAD @var{filename}
7123@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7124Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7125same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7126command line.
7127
7128@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7129@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7130@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7131MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7132option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7133
7134@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7135@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7136@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7137Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7138order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7139script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7140sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7141file, in the order specified.
7142
7143@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7144@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7145@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7146@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7147Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7148@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7149
7150@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7151@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7152@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7153@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7154You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7155specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7156If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7157@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7158@end table
7159
793c5807
NC
7160@node GNU Free Documentation License
7161@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7162@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7163
370b66a1
CD
7164@node LD Index
7165@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7166
7167@printindex cp
7168
7169@tex
7170% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7171% meantime:
7172\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7173\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7174\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7175\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7176\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7177\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7178\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7179\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7180\page\colophon
7181% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7182@end tex
7183
252b5132 7184@bye
This page took 0.798813 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.